You are on page 1of 250

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

V100R003C03

Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Issue 01
Date 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including preparations before
commissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning.

The intended audience of this document are:

Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,


which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level


of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,


which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a


problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize


or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the first release of the V100R003C03 version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3
1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................7
1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................7
1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................9
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................11
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................11
1.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................11
1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12
1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................13
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................13
1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14
1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................16
1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19


2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................20
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................22
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................23
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................26
3.1 Commissioning Process....................................................................................................................................27
3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process...................................................................................................................27
3.1.2 System Commissioning Process..............................................................................................................29
3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method........................................................................................................30
3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools.......................................................................................................................31
3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................................33
3.4.1 Site Commissioning.................................................................................................................................33
3.4.2 System Commissioning...........................................................................................................................33

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

4 Site Commissioning....................................................................................................................34
4.1 Powering On the Equipment.............................................................................................................................35
4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT......................................................................37
4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU......................................................................................................46
4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................48
4.2.3 Logging In to an NE................................................................................................................................51
4.2.4 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................52
4.2.5 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................53
4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................54
4.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards....................................................................................................................55
4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................56
4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................58
4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup...............................................................................................................59
4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.................................................................60
4.2.12 Synchronizing NE Time........................................................................................................................61
4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire....................................................................................................................62
4.2.14 Checking Alarms...................................................................................................................................63
4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool..............................................................64
4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU..............................................................................................64
4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes...............................................................................................................................66
4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link........................................................................................................................68
4.3.4 Checking Alarms.....................................................................................................................................72
4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables........................................................................................................................73
4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT...................................................................73
4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool...........................................................74
4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables................................................................................................76
4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection........................................................................................................77
4.5 Aligning the Antennas......................................................................................................................................79
4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................79
4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................82
4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................85
4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links.................................................................................................................88
4.7 Querying the DCN Status.................................................................................................................................89

5 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................90
5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..........................................................................................................92
5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................92
5.1.2 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................94
5.1.3 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................95
5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................95
5.1.5 Configuring the Logical Board................................................................................................................96
5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................97
5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................99

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes...............................................................................................................101


5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time..................................................................................................................102
5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services................................................................105
5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................106
5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................107
5.2 Testing E1 Services........................................................................................................................................108
5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester.........................................................................................108
5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS..........................................................................................................110
5.3 Testing Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................................111
5.4 Testing ATM Services....................................................................................................................................115
5.5 Testing AM Switching....................................................................................................................................118
5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester....................................................................................118
5.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester......................................................................................120
5.6 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................122
5.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching......................................................................................................................122
5.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching........................................................................................................125
5.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching.......................................................................................................................128
5.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching.......................................................................................................................132
5.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching.............................................................................................133
5.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching..............................................................................................................136
5.7 Checking the Clock Status..............................................................................................................................140
5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link..................................................................................................................140
5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER.....................................................................................................................................144

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool........................................................................................147


6.1 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................148
6.2 Operation Interface.........................................................................................................................................148

7 Configuration Example of Service Data................................................................................150


7.1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................................151
7.2 Board Configurations.....................................................................................................................................151
7.3 Service Planning.............................................................................................................................................152
7.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................154

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................158
A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...........................................................................................................160
A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE.........................................................................................................164
A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change...................................................................................164
A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs....................................................................................165
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting....................................................................166
A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation....................................................168
A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC.......................................................................................173
A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection....................................................................180
A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.........................................................................................183

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.............................................................................186


A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................................196
A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................................198
A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation...................................................................201
A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table..................................................................................204
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General................................................................................................205
A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced.............................................................................................207

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................209
B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................210
B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................210
B.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................219
B.4 K-O................................................................................................................................................................224
B.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................230
B.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................239

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

1 Safety Precautions

About This Chapter

This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the
safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.
l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.
l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or
change the device or parts of the device (including software).
l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,
check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly
grounded.

Human Safety
l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.
l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

NOTE
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt
by laser beams.
l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist
strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,
to prevent electric shock and burn.
l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building
again in any situation.

Device Safety
l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.
l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings.

Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Indication

This symbol is for ESD protection.


A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear
an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.
Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.

This symbol is for the laser class.


CLASS 1
LASER A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.
PRODUCT Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may
damage you eyes or skin.
LASER
RADIATION

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY


WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Symbol Indication

A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is


grounded.

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should
ATTENTION 警告 be cleaned periodically.
CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 This symbol is for fan safety.


DON'T TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves
THEY SLOW DOWN !
should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather
conditions.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

High Leakage Current

WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device
cannot be ensured.

If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of
the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or
eye injury.

l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in
accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the
ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to
ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive
components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).

l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:
physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in
the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.
l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly
grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from
being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.

Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar
with the method of connecting a storage battery.

l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-
circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,
which leads to human injuries.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:

l Use special insulation tools.


l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.
l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.

Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working
battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.

Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.

When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Battery Leakage

CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.

When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the
leaking electrolyte:

l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)


l Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by
the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.

If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye
exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The
laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before
the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface
on the equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:

l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also
be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX
RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers


When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a
protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers


l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power
damages the optical interface.
l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the
IN port instead of the OUT port.
l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical
distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical
interface

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical
interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit
directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,
the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10
meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden
area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
without eye protection.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser
transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has
very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the
eyes may be damaged.

In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,
however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view
an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:

l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.
l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.
l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source
is switched off.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:

l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.


l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.

When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.

The requirements for working at heights are as follows:


l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.
l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.
l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.

l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.


l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.
l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.
l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the
ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection
measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:

l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.
l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.

l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,
clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards
are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which
may hurt you.

l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and
move stably to avoid being strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to
avoid distorting pins on the backplane.

l Slide the board along the guide rails.


l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin
of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions

l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.
l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.
l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform
any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the

flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,
you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter

This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment
damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of
microwave equipment.

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch


The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper
Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable
Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board
Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch


The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch


The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU,
as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

O: OFF

I : ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2. Turn it to the left.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2. Turn it to the right.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper


Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the
Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

1 2

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.

Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.

----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable


Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the
Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

1 2

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.

Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable.

----End

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board


Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the
Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

1 2 3

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board.

Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.


Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

3 Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment.

3.1 Commissioning Process


Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method
By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning
method.
3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools
This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the
equipment.
3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions
Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to
performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both
scenarios.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

3.1 Commissioning Process


Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process


Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends
of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites
work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.

You can use the following methods to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN
950 on site:
l Web LCT
l Handheld tool
NOTE

You can commission only basic items by using the handheld tool.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the


Web LCT)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site
when they are:
l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.
l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.
l Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT

Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring Site Connecting the Web LCT Required


Commissioning Data by
Using the Web LCT Creating NEs by Using the Required
Search Method

Log in to an NE Required

Changing the NE ID Required

Changing the Name of an Optional


NE

Setting the Communication Required


Parameters of an NE

Configuring Logical Required


Boards

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Item Remarks

Configuring IF 1+1 Optional


protection

Configuring IF/ODU Required


Information for a Radio
Link

Synchronizing NE Time Required

Configuring Orderwire Optional

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity of Testing Connectivity of E1 Required when E1 cables are


Cables Cables (by Using the Web used on the site
LCT)

Testing Connectivity of Required when network


Network Cables cables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity of Required when optical fibers


Optical Fibers are used on the site

Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Required when microwave


Antennas services are transmitted by
single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-Polarized Required when microwave


Antennas services are transmitted by
dual-polarized antennas

Querying the Status of Radio Links Required

Querying the DCN Status Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the
radio link.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the


Handheld Tool)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool on
site when they are:
l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.
l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.
l Equipped with the handheld tool.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the handheld tool
Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring Site Connecting the Handheld Required


Commissioning Data by Tool to the IDU
Using the Handheld Tool
Setting NE Attributes Required

Configuring a Radio Link Required

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity of Testing Connectivity of E1 Required when E1 cables are


Cables Cables by Using the used on the site
Handheld Tool

Testing Connectivity of Required when network


Network Cables cables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity of Required when optical fibers


Optical Fibers are used on the site

Aligning the Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Required when microwave


Antennas services are transmitted by
single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-Polarized Required when microwave


Antennas services are transmitted by
dual-polarized antennas

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the
radio link.

3.1.2 System Commissioning Process


System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network.
System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection
functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.

Table 3-3 System commissioning process


Commissioning Item Remarks

Configuring Network-wide Service Data Required

Testing E1 Services Testing E1 Services Required when E1 service are available and
by Using a BER a BER tester is available on site
Tester

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Item Remarks

Testing E1 Services Required when E1 services are available and


Through PRBS no BER tester is available on site

Testing Ethernet Services Required when Ethernet services are


available

Testing ATM Services Required when ATM services are available

Testing AM Testing AM Required when the AM function is enabled


Switching Switching by Using and a BER tester is available on site
a BER Tester

Testing AM Required when the AM function is enabled


Switching Without and no BER tester is available on site
a BER Tester

Testing Protection Testing IF 1+1 Required when the radio links are configured
Switching Switching with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

Testing N+1 Required when the N+1 protection is


Protection configured
Switching

Testing SNCP Required when the SNCP is configured


Switching

Testing ERPS Required when ERPS is configured


Switching

Testing MPLS APS Required when MPLS APS protection is


Protection configured
Switching

Testing Linear MSP Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP is


Switching configured

Checking the Clock Status Required

Testing 24-Hour BER Required when E1 services are available

3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method


By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning
method.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

NOTE

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system
commissioning are defined as follows:
l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of the
radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site.
l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network by
connecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data for
each site.

Single-hop Commissioning
The single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission
networks (for example, a network with only one or two radio link hops). By performing single-
hop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time. The
major commissioning steps are as follows:

1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.


2. Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs.
3. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.
4. Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.
NOTE

The Web LCT is used for single-hop commissioning, and therefore this document does not detail how to use
the Web LCT. For details about how to use the Web LCT, see the commissioning guide in the documentation
package of the Web LCT version.

Network Commissioning
The network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmission
networks. The major commissioning steps are as follows:

1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.


2. Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT or configure site
commissioning data by using the handheld tool.
3. Use the U2000 to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services converge.
4. Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services
converge.

3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools


This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the
equipment.

Documents
The following document should be available before commissioning the equipment:

l Engineering design documents, including:


– Network plan
– Engineering design

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

l Commissioning guides, including:


– OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide
– OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

Tools
Table 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task.

Table 3-4 Tools and meters


Tool and Meter Application Scenario

l Adjustable wrench Aligning antennas


l Screwdriver
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter that has a test cable with a
BNC connector at one end
l North-stabilized indicator

Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data by
using the Web LCT
l Testing connectivity of E1 cables
l Querying the DCN status

Handheld tool l Configuring site commissioning data


l Testing connectivity of E1 cables

BER tester l Testing connectivity of E1 cables


l Testing E1 services
l Testing AM switching
l Testing IF 1+1 switching
l Testing N+1 protection switching
l Testing SNCP switching
l Testing linear MSP switching
l Testing 24-hour BER

Network cable tester Testing connectivity of network cables

l Optical power meter Checking connectivity of optical fibers


l Short fiber jumper

PC on which the U2000 is installed Commissioning system items

E1 jumper Testing 24-hour BER

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations

NOTE

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web
LCT User Guide.

3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions


Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to
performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both
scenarios.

3.4.1 Site Commissioning


Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning.
Details about these requirements are as follows:
l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l Power is available to the equipment.
l The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed.
l The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety
are in place. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas.
l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact
the commissioning.

3.4.2 System Commissioning


Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.
Details about these requirements are as follows:
l Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed.
l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact
the commissioning.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

4 Site Commissioning

About This Chapter

Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioning
items.

4.1 Powering On the Equipment


By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system
of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.
4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT
This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to
perform site commissioning.
4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool
This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.
4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables
During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces
incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test
connectivity of the cables.
4.5 Aligning the Antennas
Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has
a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.
4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links
After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links
are in the normal state.
4.7 Querying the DCN Status
The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the Search
For Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

4.1 Powering On the Equipment


By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system
of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisite
l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l The power system is available. The voltage, pole connection, and fuse current of the power
system have been checked in the process of connecting power cables.
l The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


None.

Context
l For the OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Fuse currents

Chassis Fuse Current

OptiX RTN 950 ≥ 20 A

l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board:

Chassis Board Type

OptiX RTN 950 CSH/CST

Precautions

CAUTION
l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the nominal voltage for the input power
of each PIU board must be the same.
l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device.
Hence, you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. If the switch points to "O",
the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", the switch is turned on.
l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not power on
the cabinet. First, reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected. Then, power on the equipment
and check the status of the indicators. In normal conditions, the PIU and FAN indicators are
steady green, as shown in Figure 4-1. Table 4-2 provides the descriptions for the different states
of the indicators.

Table 4-2 Status of indicators

Indicator State Description

PWR Steady green Indicates that the power supply is in


the normal state.

Off Indicates a power failure.

FAN Steady green Indicates that the fan is running


properly.

Steady red Indicates that the fan is faulty.

Off Indicates that the fan is powered off.

Figure 4-1 Normal state


PIU indicator FAN indicator

Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensure
that the equipment is powered on. The board indicators should conform to the following states
and sequences.
1. The PROG indicator should be green, off, blinking green, and off. The process lasts about
1 minute if service data is not configured.
NOTE

This process lasts longer if service data is configured.


2. The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-2 Normal state

ACTC
ACTX
SYNC
PROG
STAT

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU hardware description.
l For a board other than the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is
on only after the corresponding logical board is added.

Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I".


NOTE

l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected to
the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created.
l In the event of indicator abnormalities, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the


Web LCT
This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to
perform site commissioning.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Configuration Process
Figure 4-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-3 Configuration flowchart


Start

Connecting the Web LCT to


the IDU

Creating NEs

Logging in to NEs

Changing NE IDs

Changing NE names

Setting NE communication
parameters

Configuring logical boards

Procedure for configuring an Synchronizing NE time Procedure for configuring an


radio link (XPIC enabled) radio link (XPIC disabled)

Creating an IF 1+1
Creating an XPIC group protection group

Setting the AM attributes of Configuring the IF/ODU


the XPIC hybrid radio link information of a radio link

Creating an IF 1+1 protection


group Checking alarms

Configuring the IF/ODU


information of a radio link End

Checking alarms
Mandatory

Optional
End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

In TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC function
is enabled.

Procedure for Configuring NE Data

Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NE data


Step Action Description

1 Connecting the Web LCT to Mandatory.


the IDU

2 Creating NEs by Using the Mandatory. It is recommended that you


Search Method create an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode.

3 Logging In to an NE Mandatory.
Enter correct values in User Name and
Password. The default User Name is lct,
and the default Password is password.

4 Changing the NE ID Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:


l Set ID according to the guideline
specified in the DCN plan.
l If a specific extended NE ID is required,
change Extended ID.

5 Changing the NE Name Optional.

6 Setting NE Communication Mandatory if special requirements are


Parameters imposed on the IP address of the NE. Set
IP and Subnet Mask as required.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed
manually, the IP address changes to
0x81000000 + NE ID.

7 Configuring Logical Boards Mandatory.

8 Synchronizing NE Time Mandatory. This operation synchronizes


NE time with the time on the computer that
runs the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Disabled)

Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC disabled)


Step Action Description

1 4.2.8 Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1


Creating an protection.
IF 1+1 Set the parameters according to the network plan.
Protection
Groupa

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step Action Description

2 4.2.9 Mandatory.
Configuring l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters
the IF/ODU as follows:
Information
of a Radio – Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network
Link plan.
– Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and
TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
– Set TX Status to Unmute.
– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal
level specified in the network plan. The antenna
misalignment indication function is enabled only after
this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30
consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables
the antenna misalignment indication function.
NOTE
l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset
ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you
need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.
Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz,
128QAM.
l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters as follows:
– Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel Bandwidth
according to the network plan.
– Set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set
Manually Specified Modulation Mode to
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
according to the network plan.
– Set Guarantee E1 Capacity and Link ID according
to the network plan.
– Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and
TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
– Set TX Status to Unmute.
– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal
level specified in the network plan. The antenna

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step Action Description

misalignment indication function is enabled only after


this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30
consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables
the antenna misalignment indication function.
NOTE
l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset AM
Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site
requirements.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection,
you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each
link.

3 Checking Mandatory.
Alarms

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Enabled)

Table 4-5 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC enabled)


Step Action Description

1 4.2.10 Mandatory.
Creating an Set the parameters according to the network plan.
XPIC
Workgroup

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step Action Description

2 4.2.11 Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:


Setting the l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM
Hybrid/AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually
Attributes Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of
of the XPIC the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network
Workgroup plan.
l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Enable Status to
Disabled. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to
the modulation mode according to the network plan.
l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and
vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.
NOTE
In TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to be
configured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled.

3 4.2.8 Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1


Creating an +1 protection groups.
IF 1+1 Set the parameters according to the network plan.
Protection
NOTE
Group One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The radio
link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC
workgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in the
horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC
workgroup.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step Action Description

4 4.2.9 Mandatory. Configure the IF and ODU information in both


Configuring horizontal and vertical polarization directions. Set parameters
the IF/ODU as follows:
Information l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters
of a Radio as follows:
Link
– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received
signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna
misalignment indication function is enabled only after
this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms
on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30
consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables
the antenna misalignment indication function.
– Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the
horizontal and vertical polarization directions.
– NOTE
l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset
ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need
to configure the IF and ODU information on the main
radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD,
you need to configure the IF and ODU information on
the main radio link and the ODU information on the
standby radio link.
l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection,
you need to configure the IF and ODU information on
each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1,
28MHz, 128QAM.
l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters as
follows:
– Set Guarantee E1 Capacity according to the network
plan.
– Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received
signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna
misalignment indication function is enabled only after
this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms
on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30
consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables
the antenna misalignment indication function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step Action Description

– Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the


horizontal and vertical polarization directions.
NOTE
l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset
AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to
site requirements.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link
and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection,
you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each
link.

5 Checking Mandatory.
Alarms

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU


Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and
for other commissioning items.

Prerequisite
The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.

Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop.

The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements:

l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segment
is 129.9.0.0) as the NE, but their IP addresses are different.
l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of the
NE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0).
l The default gateway IP address is blank.

Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the
system control, switching, and timing board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NMS/COM

CAUTION
Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the
NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipment
or test tool may be damaged.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode.
Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection. For pin
assignments for crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Network Cable in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio
Transmission System IDU Hardware Description.
At this point, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). A
message will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the
operating system has been configured to do so. If the operating system displays a message
indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address.

Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser.

Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower.

Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker.


NOTE
If plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed, disable their blocking function.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer.


1. Run the Internet Explorer.
2. Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer.
3. On the General tab, click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area.
4. In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and then
click OK.
5. After being returned to the General tab, click OK.

Step 8 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.


The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login.
l User Name: admin
l Password: admin
If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in the
Internet Explorer.

----End

4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method


The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisite
l The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state.
l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Click NE Search in NE List and select a desired search type.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

If... Then...
All NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Perform Step 2 to Step 5.
Ethernet cables
Not all NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Perform Step 6 to Step 11.
Ethernet cables

Step 2 Select NE Search.


The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Local IP Address based on the network planning information.


NOTE

Local IP Address indicates the IP address of an Ethernet port on the NMS server. There may be multiple Local
IP Address values because an NMS server may have multiple network adapters.

Step 4 Set NE IP Address based on the network planning information.


NOTE

NE IP Address indicates the IP addresses of all NEs (searched out by the system automatically) that are
connected to the NMS server directly through Ethernet cables.

Step 5 Click OK.


TIP

When NE Search is selected, the system can directly log in to NEs. You do not need to enter the user name
and password.

Step 6 Select Advanced Search.


The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Optional: If you select IP auto discovery, then:


1. Click Search.
2. After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

In the IP auto discovery mode, the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that are
managed by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides.

Step 8 Optional: If you select Search NE, then:


1. Click Manage Domain.
The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
2. Optional: Click Add to add a network segment. Then, set Domain Type and Domain
Address.
3. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Modify to modify the network
segment.
4. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Delete to delete the network
segment.
5. Click Search.
6. After the WebLCT finds the NEs, click End Search.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

During initial configuration, Manage Domain takes the default value of 129.9.255.255. After the IP address
of the gateway NE is changed, the value of Manage Domain also needs to be changed. The default network
segment cannot be modified or deleted.

Step 9 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.
Step 10 Click OK.
A new NE has been added to the NE list.

Step 11 Click Cancel.

----End

4.2.3 Logging In to an NE
After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.
TIP

You can select multiple NEs at one time.


The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

l The default User Name is lct.


l The default Password for user lct is password.
Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed
from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer.
The NE Explorer is displayed.
TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.


TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout
diagram.

l Click to collapse/expand the legend.

----End

Related References
A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE

4.2.4 Changing the NE ID


Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique.
Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.
The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK.


Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box.

----End

Related References
A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change

4.2.5 Changing the NE Name


For ease of identification in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE's geographical
location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field.
NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters


The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP
address, and the subnet mask.

Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.
Step 3 Click Apply.
NOTE

l If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.


l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment, reset the IP address of the Web
LCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. Otherwise, the NE is
unreachable to the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

----End

Related References
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

4.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards


Add the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. If the physical board is
inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and
add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite
l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l All the boards are installed correctly.
l The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the
IDU and the ODU is normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards.
Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required
but are not yet configured for certain physical boards.
Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click and select Add XXX. "XXX"
is the name of the board to be added.
Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click and select Delete.
NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the
board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

----End

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group


If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1
+1 protection group.

Prerequisite
l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
Slot Layout.
l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection group by configuring an IF 1+1
protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service
exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type to
appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the
network plan requirements.
l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to
the network plan.
4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 4 Click New.


The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows:
l Set Working Mode according to the network plan.
l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive.
l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value.
l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network plan. When Working Mode is HSB, set Enable
Reverse Switching to Disabled; when Working Mode is SD, set Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled; when Working Mode is FD, Enable Reverse Switching is invalid.
l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Related References
A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link


By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite
l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Precautions
l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the
main radio link.
l For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio
link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.
l Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF
boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization.
l For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links
respectively.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1
count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured
unsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.
The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to
which the IF board is connected belongs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.


NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows:


l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan.
l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. The value of this parameter should not be higher than
the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU.
l Set TX Status to Unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication
function is enabled only after this parameter is set.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup


If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup,
the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and
ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links.

Prerequisite
l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are
added to the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Step 3 Click New.


The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Related References
A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup


After the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC
Integrated IP radio link according to the planned values.

Prerequisite
l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l The XPIC protection group has been created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Background Information
The XPIC IF boards, IFX2 and ISX2, support Integrated IP radio, and the AM attributes can be
configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.

Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Hybrid radio link.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

4.2.12 Synchronizing NE Time


Adjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner,
the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal
event occurred.

Prerequisite
l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.
l Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM
Time from the shortcut menu.

----End

4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire


The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network
maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General tab.
Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire.
1. Click the Advanced tab.
2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

3. Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

4.2.14 Checking Alarms


By checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can determine whether the equipment
is working properly.

Prerequisite
l The equipment is connected to the Web LCT.
l Data configuration is complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click on the toolbar.
Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.
Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l SYNC_C_LOS
l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l XPIC_LOS
For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the


Handheld Tool
This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.

4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU


The handheld tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration.

Prerequisite
The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Handheld tool

Procedure
Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950, as shown in Figure
4-4.

Figure 4-4 Connecting the handheld tool to the IDU

Hand-held
tool

NMS/COM port on
the CSH, CST board

MINI USB
port DB9-female DB9-male RJ-45 connector

Step 2 Press the Power button on the handheld tool until the handheld tool starts. Two seconds later,
the login window is displayed.

Step 3 Press Up or Down button to log in to the local NE or another NE, and then press Enter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Optional: If you select to log in to another NE, enter the basic NE ID and extended NE ID.
1. Enter the extended NE ID, and then press Enter.

2. Enter the basic NE ID, and then press Enter.

3. Ensure that the NE ID is correct, and then press Enter.

NOTE

If the input basic NE ID or extended NE ID is incorrect, press the C button to return to the upper-level
menu and rectify it.

Step 5 The handheld tool is logged in to the system automatically and the NE information is queried.
The information about the queried slot is displayed in the standby window.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login window, the handheld tool starts another login
attempt until login succeeds.
l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Do not press any button in the login
process. Otherwise, the system stops the login process.
l In the standby window, the handheld tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button.
l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby window, check the physical
connection between the handheld tool and the NE. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relog
in to the system.
l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physical
connection. If the arrow blinks regularly, the connection is normal. Otherwise, relog in to the system
according to the prompt message of the system.

----End

4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes


Setting NE attributes includes setting NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.
NOTE

In the case of the Integrated IP radio, the AM function is disabled by default on the handheld tool.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F2 to configure NE attributes.

Step 2 Set NE name.


1. Select 1-NE name and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set the NE name according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface.
l An NE name can contain a maximum of 21 characters currently. You can press F1 to shift between
different symbols.
3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID.
1. Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set NE ID according to the network plan.


3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
4. Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

5. Set the extended ID according to the network plan.


6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
Step 4 Configure NE IP, subnet mask, and gateway NE.
1. Select 5-IP and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Set NE IP according to the network plan.


NOTE

The IP address is composed of four fields. After you finish one field, press Enter to enter the next
field.
3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
4. Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

5. Set the subnet mask according to the network plan.


6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
7. Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

8. Set the gate NE according to the network plan.


9. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
Step 5 Select 8-APPLY, and press Enter to save the data.
The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. Then, the system starts saving the previous
configuration.
NOTE

l In the configuration process, you can press C to return to the previous menu.
l After the system saves the configuration, it automatically backs up the database and the backup operation
lasts 30 to 60 seconds. You need to check the backup result.
l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process, the handheld tool automatically relogs in
to the system after the system successfully backs up the updated data. Then, the standby interface is displayed.
If the system fails in backing up the updated data, the active configuration interface is displayed.

----End

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link


To configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information, and protection
modes of the radio link.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F1 to configure IF attributes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

By default, the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot with the
smallest number.

Step 2 Select the required IF board.


1. Select 1-Board and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. Select the online IF board.


3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.
NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the
main radio link only.

Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection.


1. Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF 1+1 protection
modes is displayed.

2. Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to the network plan.

When you configure IF 1+1 protection with the handheld tool, the default main/standby IF
boards are as follows:

Link ID Slot of Main IF Board Slot of Standby IF Board

1 1 2

2 3 5

3 4 6

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the
main radio link only.

Step 4 Configure IF information for a radio link


1. Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF bandwidth
is displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.
a. Select a working mode for the ISU2/ISX2 board by pressing the Up and Down keys. Then, press
Enter. The configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

b. If you select 1-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native E1+ETH) mode. The
following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

c. If you select 2-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native STM-1+ETH) mode. The
following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

d. If you select 3-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in SDH mode. The following figure shows
available IF bandwidth in this mode.

2. Select the IF bandwidth according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.


NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the
main radio link only.
4. Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of modulation modes
is displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, interfaces for selecting modulation modes are IF bandwidth-specific.
5. Select the modulation mode according to the network plan.
6. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.
NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the
main radio link only.

Step 5 Configure the ODU information of an NE.


1. Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit
frequencies is displayed.

2. Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Press the F1 key to enter a point.


l If the ODU is online, the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports.
3. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
4. Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of T/R spacing is
displayed.

5. Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to the network plan.
NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.


6. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

7. Select 4-TX Power and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit power
is displayed.

8. Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to the network plan.
NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.


9. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the configuration.
The system starts delivering the configuration. After the configuration is delivered, the last line
of the system interface displays Any Key To Continue.
Step 7 Press any key to continue. After the configuration data is saved, the current configuration
interface is automatically displayed.
NOTE

The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds.

----End

4.3.4 Checking Alarms


By checking the alarms generated on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment is
working properly.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. Then, the query interface is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

TIP

You can press the Up or Down button to check the query result about OptiX RTN 950.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.


Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l SYNC_C_LOS
l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l XPIC_LOS
For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

----End

4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables


During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces
incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test
connectivity of the cables.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT


By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables are properly connected
between the equipment and the DDF, and whether the E1 cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board, and the E1 port must travel through
the DDF before being connected to another device.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l Web LCT
l BER tester

Procedure
Step 1 At the DDF, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.

The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-5 Connecting the BER tester


DDF
RX TX

1
2
RX TX
3
. 4
..
.

BER tester

Step 2 Set the corresponding E1 port to Outloop using the Web LCT.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Observe the BER tester.
The BER tester should not display the AIS alarm any more.
Step 4 Release the outloop set in Step 2.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
Step 5 Observe the BER tester.
The BER tester should report the AIS alarm.
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports.

----End

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool


By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipment
and the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When
performing site commissioning with the handheld tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables using
the PRBS function enabled on the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Prerequisite
l The NE houses an E1 interface board, and the E1 port travels through the DDF before being
connected to another device.
l The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Handheld tool

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting the
Handheld Tool to the IDU.

Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU.
DDF
RX TX

1
2
3
. 4
..
.

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the handheld tool.
1. When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

2. Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board configuration
interface is displayed.

3. Select the tributary board that is connected to the first E1 port, and press Enter to test cable
connectivity.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

4. Check the test result.


Port 1 does not fail.

5. Press any button to display the NE information query interface.


Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at the other ports.

----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables


By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in
the normal state.

Prerequisite
The network cables are already made.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Network cable tester

Background Information
You can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports
(this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the network
cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turn
on, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-6 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester.

Network Cable End A End B


Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after
one after another. another.
Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators
one after another. turn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device.

----End

4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection


During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be
excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check
the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution
frame (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using an
optical interface board.

Prerequisite
l The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.
l The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l Optical power meter
l Short fiber jumper

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Precautions

DANGER
When you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser
beams.

Connection Diagram
When you use an optical interface board to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber
jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port
of the optical interface board on the chassis side. Figure 4-7 shows the connection.

Figure 4-7 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an optical
interface board

External
Cable

TX RX
ODF

Fiber jumper connected


to the TX port

Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface
board.

Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the optical interface board with a short fiber
jumper.

Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type of
optical interface. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A.

Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port.

Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the
optical power meter. The measured optical power is B.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. The optical power
meter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals.
Step 7 Compare the values of A and B.
l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is
correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range.
l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, verify that the fiber jumper is in good
condition and is correctly routed. Then, verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

CAUTION
If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be less
than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation
of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition
and is correctly routed. Then, Verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port.
Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and then
restore the connections when completed.

----End

4.5 Aligning the Antennas


Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has
a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes


Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge
of the main lobe and side lobes

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes


The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontal
azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical
section. Figure 4-8 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobe
with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein the
first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-8 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe

Locating the Main Lobe


Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobe
of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite
antenna reach the maximum value.
The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance,
in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° when
the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment
adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level. Whether
the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks.
Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak.
Figure 4-9 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric
rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

Figure 4-9 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna


180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe

Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-


180o 10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
90o First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe

Trough between the first side lobe


and the second side lobe, 30 dB
0o or more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
a Horizontal section of signals are very weak
b Head-on view
the antenna

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 4-10 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU).

Figure 4-10 Three tracking paths


Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations Signal levels for each path

6 7
C C'
C 6 7 C' 5
4
4 5
B B'
B B'
1 2 3
A A'
2
1 3

A A'

l Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main
lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth
of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth
of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the
elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the
elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe
and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point
6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,
points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct
method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust
the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown
in Figure 4-11, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or top to
bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe
signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth
in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks
of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as
shown in Figure 4-10 until the peak signal appears.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-11 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E

1
2

D D'
1 2
D D'
1
3
3
E E'

E'

4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas


When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisite
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.
l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,
snow, or fog.
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and
the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The Multimeter is calibrated.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l Adjustable wrench
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests)
l North-stabilized indicator

Precautions
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end,
power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennas
are aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas in the following sequence:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

1. Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during the
alignment.
2. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.
3. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna
at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.
4. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna
at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align
the antenna in the following sequence:
1. Power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennas
at both ends.
2. Power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversity
antennas at both ends.

CAUTION
You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or
screws. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the
antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.
Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the
local end and test the voltage value VBNC.
TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance,
because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-12 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:


1. Keep the remote antenna fixed.
2. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in the
horizontal direction.
When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows:
l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust
the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10.
l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust
the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-10.
Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of
line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in
Figure 4-10.
l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust
the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-10.
Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of
line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in
Figure 4-10.
3. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until VBNC
reaches the peak within the tracked range.
4. Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at
the local end.
NOTE
When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak
value, tighten the antenna at the remote end.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote
end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends

Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the
relationship curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends.
NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU.

The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department.
NOTE

l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should turn off. If the ODU
indicator blinks yellow, align the antennas.

Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.


NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process
of tightening the screws.

----End

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas


When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed booms
of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified
requirements.

Prerequisite
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.
l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,
snow, or fog
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and
the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The Multimeter is calibrated.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l Adjustable wrench
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

l Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests)
l North-stabilized indicator
l Spanner delivered with the OMT

Procedure
Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link.

If... Then...
The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT Proceed to Step 2 through Step 3.
The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna Proceed to Step 4 through Step 14.

Step 2 Adjust the antenna as a single-polarized antenna. For detailed operations, see 4.5.2 Aligning
Single-Polarized Antennas.

Step 3 After aligning the antennas, power on the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarization
directions at both ends, and check the XPD.
1. Use the multimeter to measure the received signal levels of the ODUs in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.
2. Obtain the received signal level in the horizontal polarization direction (P1) and the received
signal level in the vertical polarization direction (P2) based on the curve delivered in the
ODU carton.
3. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).

If... Then...
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is Release the captive screws of the OMT to
less than 30 dB. some extent, and turn the OMT slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold.
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2)
should not be less than 30 dB.
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is The antenna alignment task is completed.
not less than 30 dB.
4. Tighten all the screws of the antennas.
NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas
in the process of tightening the screws.

Step 4 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
horizontally polarized signals.

Step 5 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.5.2
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally
polarized signals is aligned with the antenna.

Step 6 Measure the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized
ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

2. Calculate the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the
curve diagram delivered along with the ODU.

Step 7 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P4).
1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized
ODU.
3. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
in the ODU box.
4. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).

If... Then...
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 8.
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should
not be less than 30 dB.

Step 8 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.

Step 9 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
vertically polarized signals.

Step 10 Measure the RSL (P5) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step
6.

Step 11 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P6).
1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized
ODU.
3. Calculate the RSL (P6) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
delivered along with the ODU.
4. Calculate the XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6).

If... Then...
The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 12.
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should
not be less than 30 dB.

Step 12 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.

Step 13 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD2 and XPD3 are
not less than 30 dB.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 14 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.


NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process
of tightening the screws.

----End

Related Information
In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized
signals.

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links


After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links
are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The antennas have been aligned.

Procedure
Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board.
ACT
RMT
ODU
LINK
STAT
SRV

1. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is in the
normal state.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning

2. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of
the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

4.7 Querying the DCN Status


The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the Search
For Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Prerequisite
l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.
l The antennas have been aligned.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Communication > Search
For Opposite NE from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the Search For Opposite NE tab, click Query.
On the Opposite NE List, basic information about opposite NEs in all microwave directions is
displayed.

NOTE

If basic information about the opposite NEs in a certain microwave direction is not displayed, check the
configurations in that microwave direction.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5 System Commissioning

About This Chapter

System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all system
commissioning items.

5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data


After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication
between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the
networkwide service data can be configured.
5.2 Testing E1 Services
By testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.
5.3 Testing Ethernet Services
By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, no
tester is required.
5.4 Testing ATM Services
By testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.
The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.
5.5 Testing AM Switching
By testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio
links.
5.6 Testing Protection Switching
By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal
over radio links.
5.7 Checking the Clock Status
Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network
are synchronized.
5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link
The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).
5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing
24-hour BER.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data


After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication
between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the
networkwide service data can be configured.

NOTE

This section only includes the basic configuration tasks related to NEs, TDM services, and clocks. For more
configuration tasks, see the configuration guide.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method


The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address
of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition,
the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually
creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisite
l The NMS must have proper communication with NEs.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select Transport NE Search tab.

Step 3 Select Search Mode.


NOTE

l If the U2000 server and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, it is recommended that you set
Search Mode to IP auto discovery.
l In other scenarios, it is recommended that you set Search Mode to Search for NE.

If... Then...
Search Mode is set to Search for NE Perform Step 4 to Step 7.
Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery Perform Step 8 to Step 10.

Step 4 If Search Mode is set to Search for NE, you need to add a search domain.
1. Click Add, and then the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.
2. Select an address type and enter the search address.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack software is installed
on the U2000.
l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the U2000
server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the network
segments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and related
routers.
3. Click OK.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to add several search domains.

Step 6 In the Search for NE dialog box, perform the operations described in the Note part.
NOTE

l If Create NE after search is selected, you need to specify NE User and Password.
l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search and
Upload after Create. In this manner, after the NE searching is complete, the system automatically creates
an NE and uploads the NE.

Step 7 Click Next, and then the Transport NE Search dialog box is displayed.
After the search is complete, all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list.

Step 8 If Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery, enter NE User and Password.

Step 9 Click Next to navigate to the search interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 10 After the NE to be created is displayed in Result, click Stop. In the dialog box that is displayed,
click Yes.
Step 11 Create NEs.
1. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list.
2. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE.
3. Click Create.
The Create dialog box is displayed.
4. Specify User Name and Password.
5. Click OK.
The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology.
Step 12 Optional: Repeat Step 11 to create other NEs that are not created.

----End

Related References
A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

5.1.2 Changing the NE ID


Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique.
This operation task does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.
Step 2 Choose Object Attributes.
The Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the NE Attribute[xxx] tab.
NOTE

xxx indicates the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Click Modify NE ID.


The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 6 Click OK.


A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.
Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Related References
A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

5.1.3 Changing the NE Name


To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical
location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, select the NE whose name is to be changed.
Step 2 Right-click on this NE, and then choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. The
Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab.
NOTE

xxx is the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Enter the name of the NE in Name.


NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or characters.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the dialog box indicating the operation result.
The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology.

----End

5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters


The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP
address, and the subnet mask.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.


NOTE
If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

----End

Related References
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

5.1.5 Configuring the Logical Board


If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the
logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the
slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram.

Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then choose Add
XXX.
NOTE

XXX is the name of the board to be added.

Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete.
1. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the
board.

----End

5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group


If the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, create the IF 1+1 protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection configuration by configuring the IF
1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board that carries the original
service, however, needs to be set as the working board.

Procedure
Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type to
appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the
network plan requirements.
l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to
the network plan.
4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click Create.


The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the
IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between
them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received
signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between
them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With
SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the
switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to
Revertive Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current
state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored
to normal.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended
that you use the default value.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse
Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enabled.
l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and
Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case,
protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

----End

Related References
A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link


By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the
main radio link.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

l For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio
link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.
l Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF
boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization.
l For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links
respectively.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1
count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured
unsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.
The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link that the IF board or ODU
connected to the IF board belongs to.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.


1. Optional: For ISU2/ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type according to the network plan. Click
Apply.
NOTE

l After this operation, the IF board will be reset. Set other IF information after the IF board starts up.
l For ISU2 and ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type appropriately for the ISU2 and ISX2 boards before
configuring IF 1+1 protection, N+1 protection, and XPIC.
2. Set other IF information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID,
and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme.
In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme
that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure
and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the
AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this
parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid
radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.


NOTE

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used
in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.

Step 7 Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes


To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.

Precautions
l For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC
attributes of the main IF board.
l The following procedure describes the ATPC parameter configurations in the IF port
configuration dialog box for the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the
Create XPIC Protection Group window.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Step 3 Set the parameters of ATPC attributes.

NOTE

l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that
you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses
the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC
Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time


By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server,
you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone
and time must be set correctly on the PC or server running the NMS software.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on
the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the
Main Menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then click

Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.

Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set the time synchronization
mode and the related parameters.
1. Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
a. Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then choose
Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

b. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.


c. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
3. Click Apply.
4. Optional: Set auto synchronization parameters.
a. Set auto synchronization parameters.

b. Click Apply.
c. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.
NOTE

l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set Synchronous Mode to NM.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set Synchronous Mode to
Standard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Step 6 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set the time
synchronization mode and the related parameters.
1. Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
2. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP
server.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Close. The dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result is closed.
5. Configure the upper-layer NTP server.
a. Select the NE, right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server is
configured, and then choose New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

b. Configure the parameters related to the NTP server.

c. Click Apply.
d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.
6. Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server.
NOTE
Before the copy operation, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP for the source NE and the target
NE.

a. Select the NE to be copied, right-click, and then choose Copy Standard NTP
Server.
b. Select the NE to be pasted, right-click, and then choose Paste Standard NTP
Server.
c. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
d. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

----End

Related References
A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services


In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service
sink.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click Create.


The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End

Related References
A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources


This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock
synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Step 3 Click Create.
The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select the clock sources.


TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources.

Step 5 Click OK.


Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources.

Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority of this
clock source.
NOTE

The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal
clock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external
clock sources.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 9 Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire


The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network
maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire.


1. Click the Advanced tab.
2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

3. Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

5.2 Testing E1 Services


By testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM
function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.
l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester


If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

Prerequisite
The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through
the DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester
NOTE

For a test of CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbit/s timeslot setting is
necessary.

Procedure
Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.
The BER tester indicates the AIS alarm.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester


DDF
RX TX

1
2
RX TX
3
. 4
..
.

BER tester

Step 2 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 3 Test the bit errors for two minutes.


There should be no bit errors.
NOTE

For a test of CES services, it is necessary to configure 64 Kbit/s timeslots on a BER tester to align with the
timeslots carrying CES services.

Step 4 Release the inloop set in Step 2.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

8. Click Close.
Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to test all other E1 ports.

----End

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS


If no BER tester is available, you can test E1 services by using the PRBS test system embedded
in the equipment.

Prerequisite
l The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted
through the DDF.
l The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions

CAUTION
l When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time.
l CES services do not support a PRBS test.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
Step 3 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters:
l Direction: Cross
l Duration: a value from 120 to 180
l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 5 Click Start to Test.


The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, are you
sure to continue?
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result.
The curve diagram should be green.
Step 8 Release the inloop set in Step 1.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 9 Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 to test all other E1 ports.

----End

5.3 Testing Ethernet Services


By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, no
tester is required.

Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be configured.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions when the AM
function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.
l The tested Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services, EoS/EoPDH services, or Ethernet services
carried by PWs.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


The following test procedure considers the Ethernet service from PORT2 on NE2 and PORT3
on NE3 to PORT1 on NE1 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-2.The three Ethernet ports are
not on the EMS6/EFP8 boards.

Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 2 PORT 2

VLAN ID=100
NE 1
PORT 1

NE 3
PORT 3
Microwave network

VLAN ID=200

The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100, and the VLAN ID of the Ethernet
service from NE3 to NE1 is 200.

NOTE

If the Ethernet ports are on the EMS6/EFP8 boards, you can still perform the following steps to test the
Ethernet services by eliminating the need to set up the remote maintenance end point. In addition, the
operations on the NMS are different. For details, see Creating MDs, Creating MAs, Creating MPs, and
Performing an LB Test.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1, NE2, and NE3.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains.
l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1, NE2, and NE3


NOTE

The maintenance domain names and the maintenance domain levels of the NEs must be the same.

4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance associations.
l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3
l Relevant Service: services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3
NOTE

Click in Relevant Service, and select associated services in the New Maintenance
Association dialog box.

4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 3 Configure the MEPs of NE1, NE2, and NE3.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.
4. Configure the parameters of the new MEPs.
l MP ID: 101 for NE1, 102 for NE2, and 103 for NE3
l Direction: Ingress for NE1, NE2, and NE3
l CC Status: activation for NE1, NE2, and NE3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
4. Click New.
Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is
displayed.
5. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs.
l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1, and 101 for NE2 and NE3
NOTE

Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3, and set the
Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1.

6. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3.
1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1, and then choose
Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.
2. Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to Port 1, click OAM.
3. Select Start LB.
The LB Test window is displayed.
4. Select Destination Maintenance Point ID, and set the parameters in Test Node.
l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)
l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2)
l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value, and the parameter can
also be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different
packet lengths.)
NOTE

The maximum Packet Length is 1400.


l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)

5. Click Start Test.


6. Check Detection Result.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

7. Repeat Step 5.4 to Step 5.6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3.
l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)
l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3)
l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)
l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended)
l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

----End

5.4 Testing ATM Services


By testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.
The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

Prerequisite
l End-to-end ATM services must be configured.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
When an LB test is performed on the ATM service, the segment and end attribute is set to specify
the types of transmitted ATM OAM cells.
l When Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point, segment LB cells are transmitted.
l When Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint, end-to-end LB cells are transmitted.

Test Connection Diagram


This example shows how to test the ATM service over a radio link hop. The method for testing
the ATM services over multiple radio link hops is the same. Figure 5-3 shows the test connection
diagram. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950.
The services of the boards on the NE1 and NE2 are configured as follows:
Attribute NE A NE B

UNI Service source 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1)

Bound port 3-MD1-1 (Port-1) 3-MD1-1 (Port-1)


3-MD1-2 (Port-2) 3-MD1-2 (Port-2)

VPI 1 101

VCI 51 501

NNI PW ID 1 1

Service source - -

Bound port - -

VPI 101 101

VCI 501 501

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service
UNI NNI NNI UNI
VPI VCI VPI VCI VPI VCI VPI VCI
1 51 101 501 101 501 101 501

NodeB NE A NE B RNC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Set the segment and end attributes of the ATM services on the NE A and NE B.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Segment and End Attribute tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.
3. As for NE A and NE B, set Segment and End Attribute to Segment point.
4. As for NE A and NE B, set Connection Direction to Sink.
5. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set the identifier at the loopback point from NE A to NE B.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree. Click the LLID tab.
2. Set Country Code, Network Code, and NE Code.
Set the parameters of NE A as follows:
l Set Country Code to 00 86.
l Set Network Code to 00 16.
l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00.
Set the parameters of NE B as follows:
l Set Country Code to 00 86.
l Set Network Code to 00 16.
l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00.
NOTE

If the default LLID is unique on a network, the default LLID can also be used.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Close.
Step 3 Test the ATM service from NE A to NE B.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.
3. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.
4. Click Test to start an LB test.
5. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded.
If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test
result.
Step 4 Test the ATM service from NE B to NE A.
1. With reference of Step 1, set Connection Direction of NE A to Sink; set Connection
Direction of NE B to Source.
2. Select NE B from the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree.
3. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

4. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B.


5. Click Test to start an LB test.
6. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded.
If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test
result.

----End

5.5 Testing AM Switching


By testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio
links.

5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester


If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test AM switching.

Prerequisite
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.
l The E1 service must be configured.
l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester

Precautions
The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE.
NOTE

Test the E1 services with the highest priority, which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode.

Step 2 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.


7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 3 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.


1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to
the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
4. Click Apply.

Step 4 Query the AM working status on the local NE.


1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set
value.

Step 5 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors.


The test result should show that no bit error occurs.

Step 6 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.
1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned
values.
4. Click Apply.

Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.


1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity of a preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

Step 8 Check the BER test result.


There should be no bit errors.

Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

----End

5.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester


If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio
links.

Prerequisite
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.
l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.
1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to
the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.


2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.
3. In Monitored Object Filter Criteria, select All.
4. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.
5. In Count, select FEC Performance. In Display Options, select Display Zero Data and
Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds.
6. Click Query, and then close the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. If the
value is not 0, choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performance
values.

Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE.


1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set
value.

Step 4 Reset the performance event register.


1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.
3. Click Reset.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Yes.
5. Click Close.
Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.
1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned
values.
4. Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board
on the local NE.
In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0.
Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity of a preset value.

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

5.6 Testing Protection Switching


By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal
over radio links.

5.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching


You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the
working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection.
l E1 services are configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:


l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3
l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5
l Main ODU: ODU in slot 23
l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NE A NE B

As shown in Figure 5-4, the following procedures use the E1 services between NE A and NE
B that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example.
NOTE

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU
on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs
at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs
at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board
of Channel in Protection Group before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 through Step 11.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 through Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.


8. Click Close.
Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.
The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.
Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A.
1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enable.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Close.
Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.
3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board
3-ISU2.

Step 7 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 8 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the services are restored after
transient interruption.
No BER tester is available on site, and the Refer to 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using
E1 services are transmitted on the radio PRBS to test availability of the E1 services.
link
No BER tester is available on site, and the Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test
Ethernet services are transmitted on the availability of the Ethernet services.
radio link

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.
3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board
5-ISU2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.

Step 11 Release the software inloop set in Step 3.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 12 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 5.


1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse
Switching to Disable.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Close.

----End

5.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching


You can verify whether the IF N+1 protection function works normally by checking the working
board of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing N+1 protection switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:


l Main IF boards: ISU2 in slot 3 and ISU2 in slot 5
l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 4
l Main ODUs: ODU in slot 23 and ODU in slot 25
l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE A NE B

As shown in Figure 5-5, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and
NE B that are configured with the N+1 (N=2) configuration as an example.

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot Mapping
Relation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.


The BER tester should show that no bit error occurs.

Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose
Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working units 3-ISU2-1 and 5-
ISU2-1 and the protection unit 4-ISU2-1 should be Normal.

NOTE

If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the services are restored after
a transient interruption.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS
E1 services are transmitted on the radio to test availability of the E1 services.
link.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test
Ethernet services are transmitted on the availability of the Ethernet service.
radio link.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose
Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 3-ISU2-1 for the
service that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

----End

5.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching


You can verify whether SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCP
protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The equipment is configured with the SNCP.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram


As shown in Figure 5-6, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and
NE C that are configured with SNCP as an example. Figure 5-6 shows a network composed of
radio links, and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of optical fiber
links.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing SNCP switching

NE A and NE C are configured as follows:


l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3
l East IF board: ISU2 in slot 4
l West ODU: ODU in slot 23
l East ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE A

Working
Protecting SNC SNC

NE D
NE B

NE C

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service before
an d after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 through Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 through Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE C, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.


3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester.
The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.
Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and choose
Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.
2. In Working Service, select an SNCP service that is already created, then click Function,
and finally select Query Switching Status.
3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection
Service.
In Current Status, Normal should be displayed. In Active Channel, Working
Channel should be displayed.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the services are restored after
a transient interruption.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

If... Then...
No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS
E1 services are transmitted on the radio to test availability of the E1 services.
link.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and choose
Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.
2. Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status.
3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection
Service.
In Current Status, the service switching mode is displayed. In Active Channel,
Protection Channel should be displayed.

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching


You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of
the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l The equipment is configured with ERPS.
l The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is
properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


As shown in Figure 5-7, the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configured
with ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example. The RPL owner node is NE D.

Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing ERPS


NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows:
l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3
l East IF board: ISU2 in slot 5
l West ODU: ODU in slot 23
l East ODU: ODU in slot 25

East West

NE B
Protection channel East
West

NE A NE D

East
West
Working channel
NE C
West
East

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.
3. The value of State Machine Status should be Idle.

Step 2 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.
3. The value of State Machine Status should be Protection.

Step 5 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.


1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.

----End

5.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching


By checking the change in the status of MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching,
you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l The MPLS tunnel protection group must be created properly.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
1:1 protection
In normal situations, services are transmitted in the working tunnel. That is, services are
transmitted and received in a different tunnel respectively. When the working tunnel is faulty,
the equipment at the transmit end transmits services through the protection tunnel, and the
equipment at the receive end receive services through the protection tunnel after a negotiation
through the APS protocol. Therefore, service switching is realized.

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-8 shows the connection diagram for testing MPLS APS protection switching. NE A
and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950 NEs.

Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection

Working Tunnel

NE A NE B

Protection Tunnel

Procedure
Step 1 Query the switching status of the current MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group on NE A and NE
B.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab, right-click the tested protection group, and then
choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu, to check the MPLS protection
group configured on the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

3. Choose the protection group for switching, and check its switching status. In normal
situations, the switching status should be Normal.

Step 2 Switch the services to the protection tunnel manually and forcedly.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.
3. Right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Forced Switching from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE

l Forced switching: With the highest priority, the operation is performed no matter whether the
current status of the protection tunnel is normal.
l Manual switching: The operation is performed only when the status of the protection tunnel is
normal.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
4. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Close.

Step 3 Query the switching status of the MPLS 1:1 protection groups on NE A and NE B after the
switching.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.
3. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Query Switching Status from the
shortcut menu, to check Switching Status of the tunnel protection group.
In normal situations, the switching status should be Forced Switching.
4. Query Active Tunnel of the tunnel protection group.
In normal situation, Working should be Standby, and Protection should be Active.

NOTE

l If Forced Switching is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should be
Forced Switching.
l If Manual Switching to Protection is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group
should be Manual (Working to Protection) Switching.

Step 4 Restore the services on NE A and NE B to the working tunnel.


1. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching.
3. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Clear from the shortcut menu.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
4. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Close.
6. Click Query.
Services is restored to the working tunnel.

----End

5.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching


You can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port of
the linear MSP group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l The equipment must be configured with linear MSP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

l The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-9 shows linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN equipment through the connection
of optical fibers. The following procedures consider the E1 services from NE A to NE B as an
example.

Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing linear MSP switching

NE A Working channel NE B

Protection channel

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot Mapping
Relation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using the
NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.
If bit errors occur, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors.

Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.
3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.
In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.

NOTE

In the case of the working and protection units of the services that are configured with the linear MSP, the
values of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and proceed
with the linear MSP switching testing.

Step 6 Shut down the laser for the working unit on NE A.


1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE
A.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.
4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to
Close.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching.

If... Then...
The BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the services are restored after
a transient interruption.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

If... Then...
No BER tester is available on site, and the See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS
E1 services are transmitted on the optical to test availability of the E1 services.
fiber link.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.
3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.
In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch upon
signal failure.

NOTE

In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the case
of the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive.
l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status and
Protected Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires.
l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If Revertive
Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the
value of West Switching Status to Idle.

Step 9 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A.


1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE
A.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.
4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to
Open.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.


1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

----End

5.7 Checking the Clock Status


Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network
are synchronized.

Prerequisite
The clock configuration is complete. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.


NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in free-
run mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode.
l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocks
of all the NEs should be in locked mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network.

----End

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link


The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

Prerequisite
l The weather is favorable.
l The antennas must be aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the radio link and the cross-
polarization discrimination (XPD) must meet the requirements.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Background Information
The principle of the FM test is as follows:
l Test the corresponding relations between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.
l Calculate the RSL corresponding to the demodulation threshold of the MSE, that is, the
receiver sensitivity of the site.
l The current RSL minus the receiver sensitivity is the FM.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
1. The FM test can be supported by the IFU2 board and IFX2 board.
2. When the FM is tested, all the services carried on the radio link maybe interrupted.
3. For a radio link with 1+1 protection, it is recommended that you lock the protection path
before testing the main radio link and that you switch the signal to the standby path forcedly
before you test the standby radio link. The main and standby radio paths are tested
synchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at
the same time.
4. For an XPIC radio link, the paths in polarization direction V and polarization direction H
are tested synchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards are
reported at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Lock the protection channel if the radio link between two sites is under 1+1 protection.
1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > IF 1
+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click the
selected unit.
3. Choose Protection Lockout from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
5. Click OK again to close the dialog box.

Step 2 Disable the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.
1. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose
Configuration > IF Interface.
2. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
3. Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.
4. Click Apply.

Step 3 Optional: If any E1 services between the two sites are E1 Priority enabled, delete these E1
services.
1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Select the services, and right-click Delete.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

A confirmation dialog box is displayed to prompt you whether to delete the selected
services.
3. Click OK.
Step 4 Disable the E1 priority function and AM function on the radio link between two sites.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link
Configuration.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the required IF board, and set Enable E1 Priority to Disable.
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Disabled.
6. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the highest-efficiency modulation scheme.
7. Click Apply.
Step 5 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Fade
Margin.
Step 6 Click the Fade Margin tab.
Step 7 Select the IF board corresponding to the radio link that needs to be tested.

The Result dialog box displays the query result.

Step 8 In Direction, select Remote To Local.

Step 9 Click Start.


The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 10 Repeat Step 8 and Step 9. In Direction, select Local To Remote.


The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

Step 11 Restore the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.
1. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface.
2. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
3. Set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled.
4. Click Apply.

Step 12 Restore the AM function and E1 priority on the radio link between two sites.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link
Configuration.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

3. Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Enabled.


4. Set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the
Full AM Capacity to initial values.
5. Set Enable E1 priority to Enabled, and Full E1 Capacity to the initial value.
6. Click Apply.

Step 13 Optional: Reconfigure the E1 services that were deleted in Step 3.


1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Reconfigure all deleted E1 services, and click OK.

Step 14 Optional: Cancel the protection lockout for the 1+1 protection on the radio link.
1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click the
selected unit.
3. Choose Clear from the shortcut menu.
4. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

----End

5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER


You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing
24-hour BER.

Prerequisite
l The antennas must be aligned.
l The E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l U2000
l BER tester
l E1 jumper

Precautions
l If 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual
situation, perform the test for the E1 services at the first node and the last node. Through
this method, you can ensure that the test path cover all the radio links.
l The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM
function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.
l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.
l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary.
l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, test the E1 services one by one if the number of timeslots of the
services is different from each other. Do not test the services in a serial manner.
l To test CES E1 services, disable the automatic loopback release function on the PDH interface board.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the
Main Menu. The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window is displayed.
2. Select the required NEs in the Object Tree on the left side of the Automatic Disabling of NE

Function window. Then, click . The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window lists the
selected NEs.
3. For SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.
4. Click Apply.

Procedure
Step 1 At the central site, extract several typical E1 services on the equipment and then connect them
to the DDF in a serial manner. After that, input these services into the BER tester.
DDF
RX TX

1
2
RX TX
3
. 4
..
.

BER tester

Step 2 On the equipment at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

Step 3 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning

Step 4 Record the test result, which should meet the design requirements.
Step 5 Release the loopback and serial connection.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
l If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement, find out the cause
and rectify the fault. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed.
l If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection, locate the fault by
using the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hour
BER test independently.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

About This Chapter

To improve commissioning efficiency, Huawei has developed the handheld tool dedicated to
the site commissioning of the OptiX RTN equipment.

6.1 Functions and Features


The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site
commissioning of microwave equipment.
6.2 Operation Interface
The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

6.1 Functions and Features


The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site
commissioning of microwave equipment.
The handheld tool provides the following functions:
l Supports switch-on by pressing and holding the power button.
l Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on, and supports serial port login mode
from MML to NMS.
l Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards.
l Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable.
l Displays all in-service physical board information in the standby window.
l Supports settings of IF information through the F1 key, settings of NE attributes through
function key F2, and query of configurations through function key F3.
l Supports settings and query of IF information, including transmit frequency, transmit
power, T/R spacing, IF channel bandwidth, modulation mode, and 1+1 protection scheme.
l Supports settings and query of NE attributes, including NE name, NE ID, extended ID,
extended ECC, IP address, and subnet mask.
l Supports settings and query of the DCN of an NE.
l Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU.
l Supports query of the basic information, frequency range, power range, and serial number
of an ODU.
l Supports query of all current alarms on the NE.
l Supports query of the NE version and terminal version.
l Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databases
are updated.
l Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the handheld tool and the
NE when the user interface is in standby state. Supports automatic re-login in the case of
disconnection.

6.2 Operation Interface


The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface.
The handheld tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. The two types are the same in
function, but are different in exterior and key arrangement. The following figure shows the
exterior and key arrangement of the two types of handheld tool.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I handheld tool

Screen

Charge indicator

Communication Power key


indicator

Digit keys

Decimal points
Up and down Battery
Backspace
keys area
Function keys

Communication
port Back
Reset port cover lock

The keys include digit keys, function keys, power key, and confirmation key. The window
mainly displays configuration information about the NE and modification.

Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type IV handheld tool

Screen

Up and down
keys
Reset port
1 2 3 Communic-
Digit keys ation port
4 5 6 F1
Function
7 8 9 F2 keys
Backspace C 0 F3

Charge
indicator Power key

Front Back

Type I and type IV are almost the same. The main difference is with regard to the key
arrangement.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment to
describe how to configure service data.

7.1 Networking Diagram


This topic describes the networking information about the NEs.
7.2 Board Configurations
Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board
configurations of each NE.
7.3 Service Planning
The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring
the NE data.
7.4 Configuration Process
This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7.1 Networking Diagram


This topic describes the networking information about the NEs.
As shown in Figure 7-1, there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructed
by the OptiX RTN 950, you need to configure 1+1 HSB for the radio link between NE A and
NE B.

Figure 7-1 Networking diagram


101
14930M
14510M
8E1,7M,16QAM
1+1 HSB
H-polarzation

Tx high Tx low

NE A NE B
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Radio work mode
RF configuarion
Polarization

7.2 Board Configurations


Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board
configurations of each NE.
The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B, as shown
in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram


SLOT CST SLOT 7 CST SLOT 7
10
(PIU) SLOT IF1 SLOT 5 SLOT 6
11
SLOT (FAN) IF1 SLOT 3 SLOT 4
9
(PIU) SLOT 1 SP3D SLOT 2

NOTE

The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 20+n. The logical slot of the ODU
is not shown in the board layout diagram.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7.3 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring
the NE data.

NE attributes
Parameter NE A NE B

Equipment type OptiX RTN 950 OptiX RTN 950

NE ID 101 102

extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

NE IP address 129.9.0.101 129.9.0.102

Radio Link Information

Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links

Parameter Link 1

Tx high site NE A

Tx low site NE B

Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz) 14930

Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing (MHz) 420

Microwave working mode 4) 8E1, 7MHz, 16QAM

Link protection mode 1+1 HSB

Polarization directiona H (horizontal polarization)

Transmit power (dBm) 5 (NE A)


5 (NE B)

Receive power (dBm) -42 (NE A)


-42 (NE B)

ATPC enabling Disabled


NOTE
a: This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not related to the IDU
configuration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Information About IF Boards


Based on the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection,
you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Information about IF boards

Parameter Link 1

Main IF board 3-IF1

Standby IF board 5-IF1

RF configuration mode 1+1 HSB

Revertive mode Revertive (default value)

Wait to Restore Time 600 seconds (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Timeslot Allocation Information

Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram


Links-1: NE A-NE B
Station NE A NE B
Timeslot 3-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8 VC12: 1-8
VC4-1
2-SP3D:1-8 2-SP3D:1-8

Add/Drop
Foward

Figure 7-3shows the service timeslots between NEs.

E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the SP3D board in slot 2 add/drop services.

Clock and Orderwire Information

Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information

Parameter NE A NE B

Clock First clock source Internal clock source 3-IF1-1


source
Second clock - 5-IF1-1
source

Third clock source - Internal clock source

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter NE A NE B

Orderw Orderwire phone 101 102


ire number

Call waiting time 5 seconds 5 seconds

Orderwire port 3-IF1-1 3-IF1-1


5-IF1-1 5-IF1-1

Occupied E1 E1
overhead type

7.4 Configuration Process


This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Precautions
If operations including changing the ID of an NE, modifying the parameters of NE
communication, and configuring logical boards are already performed, start site commissioning
from Step 5.

Procedure
Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The parameters are set as follows.

Parameter Value

Network Segment 129.9.255.255

NOTE

In this example, the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed and
the specific IP address is unknown. Therefore, the network segment 129.9.255.255 is used as the search domain
to search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP address
of the gateway NE as the search domain.
In normal cases, NE A and NE B are created in NE List.

Step 2 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

ID 101 102

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

Step 3 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards.

Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards.

Step 4 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

Step 5 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Working Mode HSB HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1A-1 3-IF1A-1

Protection Boar 5-IF1-1 5-IF1-1

Step 6 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value (NE A) Value (NE B)

3-IF1 & 23-ODU 3-IF1 & 23-ODU

Work Mode 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link ID 101 101

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 5 5

TX Status Unmute Unmute

Receive Power (dBm) -42 -42

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Step 7 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the cross-
connections.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source 3-IF1-1 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-8 1-8


1,3-6)

Sink 2-SP3D 2-SP3D

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-8 1-8


1,3-6)

Step 8 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Clock Source Internal Clock Source 3-IF1-1

- 5-IF1-1

- Internal Clock Source

Step 9 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Call Waiting Time(s) 9 9

Phone 1 101 102

Orderwire Port 3-IF1-1 3-IF1-1


5-IF1-1 5-IF1-1

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Occupied Overhead Byte E1 E1

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

A Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching


This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE
This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.
A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching


This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Parameters for the Search Field


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Address Type IP Address of GNE IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
NSAP Address used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
IP Address Range of GNE based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Search Address - - l If Address Type is set


to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.

User Name - - This parameter specifies


the user name of the
gateway NE.

Password - - This parameter specifies


the password of the
gateway NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter for Searching for NEs


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Create NE after search Selected Deselected l To create NEs in


Deselected batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.

NE User - - l This parameter


specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Password - - l This parameter


specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Upload after create Selected Deselected l This parameter


Deselected specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE ID - - This parameter indicates


the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.

GNE Address - - This parameter indicates


the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.

GNE ID - - This parameter indicates


the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.

Created As GNE Yes Yes l This parameter


No specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Connection Mode Common Common The communication


Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifies


the communication port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Status Created - This parameter indicates


Uncreated whether the found NE is
created.

Related Tasks
5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE


This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.

Navigation Path
In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

User Name - lct This parameter specifies the name of the


user. This parameter can take the default
value in the case of initial login.

Password - - The default password of user lct is


password.

Use the same user Selected Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter User
name and Deselected Name and Password to log in to all the
password to login selected NEs.

Use the user name Selected Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter User
and password that Deselected Name and Password that were used for the
was used last time latest login to log in to the NE.

Related Tasks
4.2.3 Logging In to an NE

A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change


This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
2. Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers to


the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing


NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.

Related Tasks
4.2.4 Changing the NE ID

A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs


This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers to


the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing


NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.

Related Tasks
5.1.2 Changing the NE ID

A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter


Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP Address - Before delivery, the In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set


IP address of the NE according to the following rules:
is set to 129.9.0.x. l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
The letter x indicates gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the basic ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Gateway IP - 0.0.0.0 the planning requirements of the


Address external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when the


number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSI


over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Connection Mode Common + Security Common + Security l Specifies the connection mode that the
SSL SSL gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
Common connecting to the gateway NE.
Security SSL l If the gateway NE has no special
security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.

Related Tasks
4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters
5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters

A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC


Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF Channel ISX2: - l This parameter specifies the channel


Bandwidth 7M spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
28M 40M, the high-power ODU must be
40M used.
56M
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M

Polarization - - l This parameter indicates the polarization


Direction-V direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you install the
Polarization
two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC
Direction-H
workgroup in the slots that are at the
same layer or in the same column, and
set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that
has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V
and the IF port on the other XPIC IF
board to Link ID-H.

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.


l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
Link ID-H 2
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit


(dBm) power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum


Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
(dBm) parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Transmission - - l This parameter indicates the channel


Frequency(MHz) central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing


between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.

Transmission unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the


Status mute ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the


Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.

ATPC Upper - -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC


Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
ATPC Lower - -70.0 power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the


Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.

Related Tasks
4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work


group.

Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which


Direction-V the polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to


which the polarization direction V
corresponds.

Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which


Direction-H the polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to


which the polarization direction H
corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF Channel ISX2: - l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the


Bandwidth 7M channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
28M 40M, the high-power ODU must be
40M used.
56M l This parameter is set according to the
IFX2: planning information.
7M
14M
28M
56M

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the


Received -V(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the


Received -H(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum


Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
(dBm) parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Transmit Power - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


(dBm) transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.

Transmission - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.

Transmission unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the


Status mute transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work


group.

Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which


direction the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

AM Enable Status Disabled Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set to


Enabled Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.

Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain


of the Guarantee 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
AM Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain


of the Full AM 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Manually Specified QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation


Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
This parameter is valid only when AM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM

Transmit-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the


Modulation Mode transmit end.

Receive-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the receive


Modulation Mode end.

Parameters for ATPC Management


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC Enable Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the


Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.

ATPC Upper - - l Set the central value between the ATPC


Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Lower - - threshold to a value for the expected


Threshold(dBm) receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC Automatic Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the


Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).

Related Tasks
4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1


Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter specifies the working


FD mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
SD l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same
signal. The equipment selects signals
from the two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.

Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the


Switching Disabled reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board


of the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection


board of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm Report Only board alarms - l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Mode Only Protection Only board alarms, only IF board
group alarms alarms are reported.
Protection group l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
and board alarms Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time 0 to 600 - l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,


a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks
4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter specifies the working


FD mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
SD l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the
equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.

Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the


Switching Disabled reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board


of the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection


board of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm Report Only board alarms Only board alarms l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Mode Only protection Only board alarms, only IF board
group alarms alarms are reported.
Protection group l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
and board alarms Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time(s) 0 to 600 300 l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,


a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks
5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU


Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IF


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
network plan. The work modes of the IF
4,8E1,7MHz, boards at the two ends of a radio link
16QAM must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of


a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at
both ends of a radio link should be the
same.

Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received ID


of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 Hybrid(Native E1 l Displays or specifies the type of services


+ETH) +ETH) carried by the IF board.
Hybrid(Native l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
STM-1+ETH) Native E1 services, set this parameter to
SDH Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF Channel 3.5M - IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the


Bandwidth 7M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
14M network plan.
28M NOTE
40M l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
56M board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX


RTN 950.

AM Enable Status Disabled Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set to


Enabled Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually Specified QPSK QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation


Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM
64QAM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
NOTE
256QAM This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Modulation Mode QPSK QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM


of the Guarantee 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
AM Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
32QAM
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
64QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
128QAM supports. This parameter is set according
256QAM to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode QPSK QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM


of the Full AM 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
32QAM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
64QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
128QAM supports. This parameter is set according
256QAM to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF


board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Guarantee E1 - - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,


Capacity this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Guarantee E1 - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF


Capacity Range board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.

Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth of the


Bandwidth(Mbit/ IF board.
s)

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to


Enabled enable the E1 priority function.
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of


transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF


Range board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Frequency - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Range of TX - - l This parameter indicates the range of the


Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.

Actual TX - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit


Frequency(MHz) frequency of the ODU.

Actual RX - - This parameter indicates the actual receive


Frequency(MHz) frequency of the ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing


between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.

Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R


Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the Power


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the


transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.

Range of TX - - This parameter indicates the range of the


Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power - - l This parameter indicates the actual


(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to


Received(dBm) set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value (-10.0), the
antenna misalignment indicating
function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Actual RX Power - - This parameter indicates the actual receive


(dBm) power of the ODU.

TX Status Unmute Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the


Mute transmit status of the ODU.
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.

Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit


status of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Equipment Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band


where the ODU operates.

Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment


type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the


ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing


serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.

Transmission - - This parameter indicates the level of the


Power Level output power of the ODU.

Related Tasks
4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link
5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding


IF interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Enable Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the


Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set ATPC
Enable Status to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.

ATPC Upper - -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower - -70.0 receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC Automatic Enabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the


Threshold Enable Disabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Enabled, the equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds according to
the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled, you need to
manually set ATPC Upper Automatic
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Automatic Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Upper - - l This parameter indicates that the


Automatic equipment automatically uses the preset
Threshold(dBm) ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
ATPC Lower - -
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
Automatic
set to Enabled.
Threshold(dBm)

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization


This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Name - - This parameter indicates


the name of the NE.

NE ID - - This parameter indicates


the ID of the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Synchronous Mode Standard NTP Null l If this parameter is set


NM to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
Null of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.

Standard NTP Enabled Disabled This parameter is valid


Authentication Disabled only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP Server NE ID NE ID l If the NE functions as


Identifier IP the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to IP.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
parameter is set to IP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as


the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE,
this parameter is set to
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server 0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does


Key not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Synchronization - - l This parameter


Starting Time specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

DST Selected Deselected l This parameter


Deselected indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
l This parameter is set
according to the actual
situation.

Synchronization Period 1 to 300 1 l This parameter


(days) indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

Related Tasks
5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time
5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time

A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service


Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
3. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the


VC3 service to be created.
VC4 l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to


Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink and the cross-
connections from the service sink to the
service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the


service source.

Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.

Source Timeslot - - l This parameter indicates the timeslot


Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the


service sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of


the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.

Sink Timeslot - - l This parameter specifies the timeslot


Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.

E1 Priority High - l This parameter specifies the priority of


Low an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
None is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.

Activate Yes Yes l This parameter specifies whether to


Immediately No immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Related Tasks
5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services

A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Clock Source - - l External clock source


1 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 7.
External clock source
2 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 8.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

External Clock Source 2 Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter


Mode 2 MHz indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
l This parameter is set
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.

Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid


only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
l This parameter needs
to be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.

Clock Source Priority - - Displays the priority


Sequence (Highest: 1) sequence of clock sources.
1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.

Related Tasks
5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources

A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General


This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

2. Click the General tab.

Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Call Waiting Time 1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting


(s) time after the local station dials the
number. If the calling station does not
receive the response message from the
called station within the call waiting
time, it automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the
orderwire subnet, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to five seconds. If
more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone This parameter indicates the dialling mode
Dual-Tone Frequency of the orderwire phone.
Frequency

Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone


number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950
receives the call, the orderwire phones
on the other NEs do not ring. In this case,
the orderwire point-to-multipoint group
call changes to a point-to-point call
between two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for
all the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire


phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.

Available - - This parameter indicates the available port


Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.

Selected - - This parameter indicates the selected port


Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.

Related Tasks
4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire
5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced


This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Orderwire E1 E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead


Occupied Bytes E2 byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the
radio link always uses a customized
overhead byte to transmit the orderwire
signals. Hence, this parameter should be
set according to the occupied SDH
overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

Related Tasks
4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire
5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

B Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

B.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
B.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
B.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
B.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
B.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
B.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

B.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

B.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

ABR See available bit rate


ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to
the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

AIS See alarm indication signal


alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
analog to digital An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
converter reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
Transfer Mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control at the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

B
backward defect When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
indication to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCC See circuit cross connect
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

CIR See committed information rate


circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group N/A
Management Protocol
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
spanning tree continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.
message
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
code point differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
Multicast Routing dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
Protocol datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet private LAN An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
protection switching
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
private LAN service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
private line bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual
Connection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables,
expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

B.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
indication LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.

G
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
procedure standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See generic traffic shaping
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H
HA See high availability
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
HDLC See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
service to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve
high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
control of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP See higher order path
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

HSM hitless switch mode


HTB high tributary bus
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.

I
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
Commission
International An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
Organization for and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
Standardization ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

International An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications


Telecommunication technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
Union- letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
Telecommunication example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
Standardization Sector system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-
over ATM multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.

B.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN See local area network
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT local craft terminal
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

LSR See label switching router

M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen
display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-
machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network,
the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as
the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed
here.
maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
association end point Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
interface transmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
message The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management
communication information with their prs.
function
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label N/A
switching traffic
engineering

N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
network to network An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
interface
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
element transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding

O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit
OM Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

B.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P
packet switched A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
network
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS
popping enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
PIR See peak information rate
PLA physical link aggregation
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated
priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority,
and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext
(optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half
cable of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.


Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.

R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the
controller radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
Strength Indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
indication detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node

S
SD See space diversity
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service
Agreement * provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about
measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating
and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and
customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the
documented target measure.
SES See severely errored second
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be
transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA See service level agreement
SLA* See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable
SNC See subnetwork connection

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection


SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely
related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological
view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can
better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved,
on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment
under their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
hierarchy transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
equipment object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
management function
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
mode-1
Synchronous An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
Transport Module SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
module of order N See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.

tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TEDB See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

TIM trace identifier mismatch


time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time
slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted
over one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
database the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee
the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
switch protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

two rate three color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.

B.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).

V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual container

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

VCC See virtual channel connection


VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identifier identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group virtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VRF See virtual route forward

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary

W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore

X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

You might also like